2010 saturn vue owner manual m - general motors · iv introduction using this manual to quickly...

2010 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-39Universal Remote System . . . . 5-45

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-27Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-35Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-40Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-44Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-61

2010 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction iii

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem,and the name VUE are registeredtrademarks of Saturn Corporation.GENERAL MOTORS and GM areregistered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name "GeneralMotors of Canada Limited" forSaturn Corporation wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in the U.S.A.Part No. 25951286 A First Printing ©2009 General Motors Corporation. All rights Reserved.

iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gage,or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

vi Introduction

2 NOTES

In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-18Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.

B. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

C. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6‑4 .

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑10.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 .

F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑4.

G. Auxiliary Input Jack. SeeAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑17.

H. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

I. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

J. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 .

K. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

L. Cruise Control on page 9‑42.

M. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

N. Horn on page 5‑3.

O. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 .

P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

Q. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑40.

R. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑35.

S. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑5(If Equipped).

T. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3 .

U. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34.

V. Passenger Safety BeltReminder. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑12.

W. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 feet) awayfrom the vehicle.

1-4 In Brief

Remote Start Not Shown

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors, includingthe liftgate.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold to sound thepanic alarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

With this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q .

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps fora 10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑4 .

In Brief 1-5

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

See Door Locks on page 2‑6.

Power Door Locks

T : The power door lock switchesare located on the driver door.

To unlock the doors, press the rightside of the switch.

To lock the doors, remove theignition key and press the left sideof the switch.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑6 .

LiftgateTo lock or unlock the liftgate, if thevehicle has this feature, press Q orK twice on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or press thepower door lock switch.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the underside of theliftgate handle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

See Liftgate on page 2‑8.

Windows

All window switches are located onthe driver door. Each passengerdoor has a switch that controls onlythat window.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The power windows operate whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or while inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑29.

See Power Windows on page 2‑14.

1-6 In Brief

Seat AdjustmentManual Seats

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Power Seats

This vehicle may have power seats.

To adjust the seat location, movethe control forward or rearward.

To raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion, move thefront or rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 .

In Brief 1-7

Seat Height Adjuster

On vehicles with this feature, movethe lever upward repeatedly to raisethe seat.

Move the lever downwardrepeatedly to lower the seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Reclining Seatbacks — Manual

On seats with manual recliningseatbacks, use the lever located onthe outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5 .

Reclining Seatbacks — Power

On seats with power recliningseatbacks, the control is located onthe outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, tilt the topof the control rearward.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition, tilt the top of the controlforward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5 .

1-8 In Brief

Lumbar Adjustment

If the vehicle has this feature, theknob is located on the inboard sideof the driver seatback.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the lumbar support.

Second Row Seats

The rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

For detailed instructions, see RearSeats on page 3‑9.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on thecenter console. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

M : Press this button to turn on theheated seat.

Continue to press the button tocycle through the temperaturesettings.. High = three indicator lights.. Medium = two indicator lights.. Low = one indicator light.. Off = no indicator lights.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

In Brief 1-9

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑13.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑19.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and the seat‐mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags, androof‐rail airbags are not affected bythe passenger sensing system. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14 for more information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

1-10 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the (R) right mirror.

2. Adjust each mirror so that youcan see the side of your vehicleand the area behind yourvehicle.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

The mirrors can be manually foldedinward toward the vehicle. Return tothe original position to use correctly.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑12.

Interior Mirrors

If the vehicle has the manualrearview mirror, it can be adjustedby holding the mirror in the center tomove it for a clearer view behindthe vehicle. Reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind byturning the lever for daytime ornighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑13.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown to a comfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up firmly to lockthe steering wheel in place.

In Brief 1-11

See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

Interior LightingDome Lamp

* : Press this button on theoverhead console to keep the domelamps and other interior lampsturned off while any door is open.Press this button again to return it tothe out position and the lampsautomatically come on when anydoor is opened.

+ : Press this button to turn thedome lamps on and off while thedoors are closed.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are located onthe overhead console.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button located next toeach lamp.

For more information on interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

9 : Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released.

AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,instrument panel lights, and otherexterior lamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,instrument panel lights, and otherexterior lamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2 .. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3 .

1-12 In Brief

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

8: Single wipe, briefly move thelever down. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.For several wipes, hold thelever down.

9: Turns the windshield wipers off.

&: Sets a delay between wipes.Move the switch on top of the leverleft for less frequent wipes or rightfor more frequent wipes.

a : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 .

In Brief 1-13

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled by thissystem. Vehicles with automatic climate control automatically maintain thedesired temperature inside the vehicle.

United States version shown, Canada version similar.

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 and Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑5.

1-14 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

©¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 (Information) (XM SatelliteRadio Service, MP3, and RDSFeatures): Press to displayadditional text information related to

the current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3 or WMA song.If information is available duringXM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback,the song title information displayson the top line of the display andartist information displays on thebottom line. When information is notavailable, "NO INFO" displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using thesix softkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, orXM stations.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑4.

In Brief 1-15

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.PressO to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

4. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the time or date.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑8 .

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receiveXM programming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A fee is required to receivethe XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑6.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input, located onthe radio faceplate. External devicessuch as iPod®, MP3 players, etc.can be connected to the 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input using a3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack cable.

See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑17.

Bluetooth®

The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemallows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio system,microphone and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑18.

1-16 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

+ / − : Press and release to go tothe next or the previous preset radiostation or CD track.

K : Press to reject an incomingcall, or to end a call.

v + v − : Move the thumbwheelup or down to increase or todecrease the volume.

J 0 : Press and release to mutethe system. Press it again to turnthe sound back on.

Press and hold longer thantwo seconds to interact with theOnStar® or Bluetooth systems.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation systemprovides detailed maps of mostmajor freeways and roadsthroughout the United States andCanada. After a destination hasbeen set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a variety ofpoints of interest (POI), such asbanks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the vehicle's Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons are onthe left side of the steering wheel.

E : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. An indicator lightcomes on.

RES+: Move the thumbwheel up toresume a set speed or to accelerateto a higher speed.

−SET: Press the thumbwheel to seta speed or move the thumbwheeldown to decrease the speed.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑42.

In Brief 1-17

Power OutletsThe accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

The accessory power outlets arelocated on the rear of the centerstorage console and in the rearcargo compartment. There may be apower outlet located inside theinstrument panel storage area belowthe climate controls.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

SunroofThe sunroof switch is locatedbetween the sun visors.

To operate the sunroof, theignition must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory (RAP). See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑29.

Slide and release the switchrearward to express open thesunroof. Slide the switch forward orrearward to stop movement.

Open/Close: The sunshade opensautomatically with the sunroof orcan be manually operated.

Slide and hold the switch forward toclose the sunroof.

Vent Open/Close: Press and holdthe switch to vent; pull and hold theswitch to close the sunroof.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the 5 buttonlocated on the Instrument panel.g illuminates and the appropriateDIC message displays. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5‑31.

. Press the button again to turntraction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑40.

1-18 In Brief

StabiliTrak®

The StabiliTrak system assistswith directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.The system turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press and hold5 until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑31.

. Press the button again to turn onboth systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak System on page 9‑41.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The Tire Pressure Monitor Systemalerts you when a significantreduction in pressure occurs in oneor more of your vehicle’s tires byilluminating the low tire pressurewarning light on the instrumentcluster. The warning light will remainon until the tire pressure iscorrected. The proper tire pressuresfor your vehicle are listed on theTire and Loading Information labellocated on the driver side centerpillar (B pillar). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

You may notice during coolerconditions that the low tire pressurewarning light will appear when thevehicle is first started and then turnoff as you drive. This may be anearly indicator that your tirepressures are getting low and thetires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

Note: The Tire Pressure MonitorSystem can alert you about low tirepressure, but it does not replacenormal monthly tire maintenance.It is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑52 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑54.

In Brief 1-19

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand turns on the change engine oillight when it is time to change theengine oil and filter. The oil lifesystem should be reset to 100%only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Press the DIC vehicleinformation button to display OILLIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press the DIC Set/Reset buttonfor during 5 seconds to reset theoil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the change engine oil light isnot on, the system is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

1-20 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-553-6000

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Saturn, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.This program provides technicallytrained advisors who are available24 hours a day, 365 days a year,minor repair information or towingarrangements.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press the OnStarbutton and the current GPS locationwill be sent to an OnStar Advisorwho will assess your problem,contact Roadside Assistance, andrelay exact location to get you thehelp you need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privilegesand more.

Sign up today at:www.gmownercenter.com/saturn(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn‐by‐turnnavigation.

In Brief 1-21

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigationand Hands‐Free Calling areavailable on most vehicles. Not allOnStar services are available on allvehicles. For more informationsee the OnStar Owner's Guide orvisit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at alltimes.

The OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar call center whenQ is

pressed,] is pressed, or if theairbags or ACR system deploy.This information usually includes thevehicle's GPS location and, in theevent of a crash, additional

information regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate. Thereare other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

1-22 In Brief

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar hands-free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. PressQand request a vehicle diagnostic.If the light appears clear (no lightis appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The two keys can be used for theignition and all locks.

The key code is stamped on the keynumber plate and can be used tomake new keys at any dealer/retailer. Store this information in asafe place outside the vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lock your keysin the vehicle, you may have todamage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6 for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.


. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to195 feet (60 m) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

Without Remote Start Shown(With Remote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, this buttonis used to operate the remote startfeature. See Remote Vehicle Starton page 2‑4 for additionalinformation.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors, including the liftgate. Thevehicle's lamps may flash and thehorn may sound. See “Remote DoorLock” under Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑39 for more information.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on. The exterior lamps mayflash when unlocking the vehicle.See “Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39 for more information.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times. Press and holdL toactivate the panic alarm. The turnsignal lamps flash and the hornsounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.The alarm turns off when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orwhenL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.


Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchasedand programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When thereplacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See “Relearn Remote Key” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEREMOTE KEY FOB BATTERYmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑35.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Reassemble the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.


If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights can not be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system will operate at thesame setting as when the vehiclewas last turned off.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle. If the vehicle has the RearVision Camera (RVC), the displaylocated on the inside rearview mirrorwill remain on for aboutfour seconds. See Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9‑44 formore information.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3while the engine is still running.The engine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote start

since the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10 minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

For example, if the lock button andthen the remote start buttons arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.


Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

Power Door LocksT : The power door lock switchesare located on the driver door.. Press the right side of the switch

to unlock the doors.. Remove the ignition key and

press the left side of the switchto lock all of the doors.


Delayed LockingA chime will sound to indicate adoor or liftgate is open when you tryto lock the doors with the powerdoor lock switch. The doors will notlock, and the theft‐deterrent systemwill not arm until all the doors areclosed and five seconds havepassed.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

The doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved into a forward gear.

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door Unlock

The doors will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is movedinto (P) Park.

Lockout ProtectionWhen the power door lock switch ispressed with the key in the ignition,and any door is open, all the doorslock and the driver door unlocks.When doors are closed with the keyin the ignition, the horn will soundas a reminder.

If the doors are locked with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and the key is in theignition, a chime sounds and allexcept the driver door lock.

The lockout protection feature canbe overridden by holding the powerdoor lock switch for three seconds.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.


Doors

Liftgate

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.

To lock or unlock the liftgate, if thevehicle has this feature, press Q orK twice on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or press thepower door lock switch.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the underside of theliftgate handle and pull up.

To close the liftgate, pull down usingthe handle and close until it latches.

Liftgate Operation with Loss ofPower

To open the liftgate if the vehicle'sbattery is disconnected or thevoltage is low, access the releaselever. Remove the interior trim coveron the inside of the liftgate. Use atool to push the lever on the latchuntil the liftgate releases.


Vehicle SecurityVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

United States shown,Canada similar

The security light is located near thecenter of the instrument panel.

To arm the theft-deterrent system,press Q on the RKE transmitterwhen all doors and the hood(vehicles started with the remotestart feature only) are closed. Thesecurity light will come on solid forapproximately 30 seconds and thenflashes slowly. If Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed a secondtime, the theft-deterrent system willactivate immediately, bypassing the30 second delay. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light flashes slowly.

If any door, liftgate or the hood(vehicles started with the remotestart feature only) are openedwithout using the key or pressing Kon the RKE transmitter, the exteriorlamps flash and the horn will soundfor about 30 seconds. If Q or K onthe RKE transmitter is not pressed,

the alarm sounds and periodicallyrepeats. If the system does notoperate as described above, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

The theft-deterrent system alsoactivates if you lock the doors witha key.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident, always unlock a door withthe RKE transmitter or a key.Unlocking a door any other way willset off the alarm if the system hasbeen armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident,turn off the alarm by pressing Q orK on the RKE transmitter or byplacing the key in the ignition andturning it to START.


Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and open thedriver door.

2. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and activate the system bylocking the doors with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Wait for the security light to flashslowly.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle's headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑37.

If the alarm does not sound or thevehicle's headlamps do not flash,see your dealer/retailer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

When trying to start the vehicle ifthe engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, theremay be a problem with yourtheft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.


If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be not damaged,wait about five minutes and tryanother ignition key and check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑37. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ to have a new keymade. In an emergency, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to “learn” the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming

additional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.


Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Turn the knob to choose theleft (L) or the (R) right mirror.

2. Adjust each mirror so that youcan see the side of your vehicleand the area behind yourvehicle.

3. Return the control to the centerposition so the mirror cannot bemoved.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with outside heatedmirrors:

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑5 formore information.


Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorIf the vehicle has the manualrearview mirror, it can be adjustedby holding the mirror in the center tomove it for a clearer view behind thevehicle. Reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind by turningthe lever for daytime ornighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for more information aboutOnStar® and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar® owner guide formore information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

Your vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera. See Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9‑44 formore information.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.


Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The window switches for all doorsare located on the driver door.Each passenger door has a switchthat controls only that window.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

The power windows operatewhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or while inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑29.

Express-Down Window

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that lowersthe window without holding theswitch. Press the switch part wayand the window will open a smallamount. Press the switch down allthe way and release it and thewindow lowers all the way.

To stop the window while it islowering, press and release theswitch.


Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The vehiclehas a lockout feature to prevent rearseat passengers from operating thewindows. Press the lockout button,located with the power windowswitches, to turn the feature onand off.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing the sunvisor down, or detach the driver sunvisor from the center mount andslide it along the rod fromside-to-side.

On a visor with a mirror, lift thecover to use it.

Roof

Sunroof

The sunroof switch is locatedbetween the sun visors.

To operate the sunroof, theignition must be in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑29.

Open/Close: Slide and release theswitch rearward to express open thesunroof. Slide the switch forward orrearward to stop movement.

The sun shade opens automaticallywith the sunroof or can be manuallyoperated. The sunshade cannot beclosed with the sunroof open.

Slide and hold the switch forward toclose the sunroof. The sunshademust be closed manually.

Vent Open/Close: Press and holdthe switch to vent the sunroof.Pull and hold the switch to close it.The sunshade must be manuallyoperated when the sunroof is in thevent position.


2 NOTES

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-40

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-41Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-47Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-48Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-56

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat Position) . . . . . . . 3-58

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The rear seats have head rests thatadjust the same as the headrestraints.

The head restraints and head restsare not designed to be removed.


Active Head RestraintsThis vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the frontoutboard seating positions. Theactive head restraints automaticallytilt forward to reduce the risk of neckinjury if the vehicle is hit frombehind.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.


Seat Height Adjuster

If the vehicle has a manual driverseat height adjuster, it is located onthe outboard side of the seat nearthe front of the seat cushion.

To raise the seat, move the leverupward repeatedly until the seat isat the desired height. To lower theseat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

Power Seat AdjustmentThis vehicle may have power seats.

To adjust the seat location, movethe control forward or rearward.

To raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion, move thefront or rear of the control upor down.


Lumbar Adjustment

If the vehicle has this feature, theknob is located on the inboard sideof the driver seatback.

Turn the knob clockwise to increaselumbar support andcounterclockwise to decrease it.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

On seats with manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operatethem is located on the outboard sideof the seat.



1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power recliningseatbacks, the control used torecline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat.. To recline the seatback, tilt the

top of the control rearward.. To bring the seatback forward,

tilt the top of the control forward.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up,your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob. In a crash, you could go intoit, receiving neck or other injuries.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Heated Front SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on thecenter console. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

M (Heated Seat): Press this buttonto turn on the heated seat.

Continue to press the button tocycle through the temperaturesettings.. High = three indicator lights.. Medium = two indicator lights.. Low = one indicator light.. Off = no indicator lights.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.


Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ WARNING

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑27 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

{ WARNING

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint allthe way.

2. Lift the bar under the front of theseat to unlock it. Slide the seatas far back as it will go andrelease the bar. Try to move theseat back and forth to make sureit is locked into place.

3. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, upfully and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

4. Continue to fold the seat forwardinto the folded position.

5. Pull up on the seatback to besure it is locked.


To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, upfully and push up on theseatback.

2. Continue raising the seatbackuntil the seatback re-engages.

{ WARNING


3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

The recliner lever is also used torecline the seatback while apassenger is seated. See SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Rear SeatsThe rear split bench seatbacks canbe folded forward, upright,or partially reclined, independent ofthe other seatback position.

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To fold the seatback down:

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. Unbuckle all three safety beltsand put the front seatback in anupright position.


2. Lift the lever located on the topof the seatback to release theseatback and fold the seatbackforward.


1. Lift and hold the lever located ontop of the seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑12 for additionalinformation.


In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.


The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.


Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑44. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.


First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, this

applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.



A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34 for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑23.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.


Squeeze the release buttons (A)together and move the heightadjuster up or down to the desiredposition.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.

They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑24.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer/retailer. The guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for olderchildren who have outgrown boosterseats and for some adults. When

installed and properly adjusted, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage location, which is apocket on the side of the seat.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Storethe comfort guide in its storagelocation, which is a pocket on theside of the seat.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer willorder you an extender. When yougo in to order it, take the heaviestcoat you will wear, so the extenderwill be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use it onlyfor the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed foradults. Never use it for securingchild seats. To wear it, attach it tothe regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn orfrayed safety belts may not protectyou in a crash. They can rip apartunder impact forces. If a belt is tornor frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑24.


Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13.


Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Even if you do not have a right frontpassenger seat in the vehicle thereis still an active frontal airbag in theright side of the instrument panel.Do not place cargo in front of thisairbag.

{ WARNING

Be sure that cargo is not near anairbag. In a crash, an inflatingairbag might force that objecttoward a person. This couldcause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑27 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.


Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑42 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑44.


There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.


Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.


In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑25.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflate

during a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags will

deploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.


What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑29 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.


What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after an

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.


You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features. You must first,however, turn the ignition key to thefollowing ignition switch positions:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer/retailerfor service.


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, to

start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat andsafety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear‐facing child restraint, arear‐facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag and seat‐mountedside impact airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted side

impact airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑56 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontSeat Position) on page 3‑58.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with yourdealer/retailer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person and

enable the right front passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag(s) off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.


A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑40 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensors

that are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in

Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑61 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.


Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑31. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑19 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑19.


According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by

the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing


child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCH

seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.


Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located near the top tetheranchors.

The top tether anchors are locatedon the back of the rear seatback. Besure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.


Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather than thefront seat. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑48 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.


{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the toptether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor, if equipped.


Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and you

are using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint .


If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer/retailer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.


Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑48.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat Position)The vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑48.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50 for more information.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageYour vehicle has a storage arealocated to left of the steering wheel.Pull down on the handle to access.

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on thelever. If the glove box has a lockuse the key to lock and unlock it.The glove box divider can beremoved. The slots on the left sideare for storing the divider.

CupholdersThere are cupholders located infront of and behind the centerconsole.

To access the cupholders behindthe center console, push the button.

4-2 Storage

Front Storage

For vehicles with a storage arealocated under the front passengerseat, lift up on the end of the trayand pull it forward to access it.

Sunglasses StorageYour vehicle may have asunglasses storage compartmentlocated near the rearview mirror.Push the cover to open.

Armrest Storage

To access the rear seat armrest, pullthe handle down. Lift the top of thearmrest to access the storage area.

Center Console Storage

Your vehicle has a center consolewith an upper, lower and rearstorage area. To access the upperstorage area, lift up on the top lever.To access the lower storage area,lift up on the bottom lever. The topof the center console can extendforward. To adjust, hold the top ofthe lever up and pull the top of thecenter console forward.

Storage 4-3

To open the cover of the the rearstorage area, push the buttonlocated at the top.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover and remove itfrom the vehicle, pull both endstoward each other. To reinstall,place each end of the cover in theholes behind the rear seat.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemIf the vehicle has a cargomanagement system in the rear ofthe vehicle, it will have rails withadapters and hooks. These areused to hold the net and meshpocket.

4-4 Storage

The adapters are used to hold thenet. Slide the adapters to thedesired location on the upper andlower rail and turn the handle up tolock it in place. Compress the rodsof the net and insert them into thecorresponding openings of theadapter. The longer rod is for theupper adapter.

The hooks hold the mesh pocket. Toinsert a hook on the rail, place thehook in the upper groove of the railand press it into the lower groove.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a convenience net,located in the rear, use it to storesmall loads as far forward aspossible. The net should not beused to store heavy loads.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items. Forroof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer/retailerfor additional information.

Storage 4-5

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading your vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22.

Check that all cargo is securelyfastened to prevent damage or losswhile driving.

4-6 Storage

2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-13

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-15MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-19Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-20Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-20

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . 5-22Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-23Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-31Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-31Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-33Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-34Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-36Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-39

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-45Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown to a comfortable position.

3. Pull the lever up firmly to lockthe steering wheel in place.


Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

+ / − (Next/Previous) : Press andrelease to go to the next or theprevious preset radio station or CDtrack.

K (End Call): For vehicles withthe OnStar® system, press to end aHands-Free call, an OnStar® call,cancel an incoming call, or end theAdvisor Playback.

For vehicles with Bluetooth®, pressto end a call, or cancel anincoming call.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑18 andthe OnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

v + v −(Volume): Move thethumbwheel up or down to increaseor to decrease the volume.

J 0 (Call / Mute): Press andrelease to mute the system. Press itagain to turn the sound back on.

For vehicles with a Bluetooth orOnStar® system, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.

Move the lever up or down to selectthe wiper speed.

8(Mist): Single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. The lever returns toits starting position when released.For several wipes, hold thelever down.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.


& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Sets a delay between wipes. Movethe switch on top of the lever left forless frequent wipes or right for morefrequent wipes.

a (Low): Slow wipes.

1 (High): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.

Rainsense™

Notice: Going through anautomatic car wash with thewipers on can damage them. Turnthe wipers off when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

For vehicles with Rainsense™windshield wipers, the moisturesensor is located next to the insiderearview mirror and is mounted onthe windshield. When active, thesesensors are able to detect moistureon the windshield and automaticallyturn on the wipers.

To turn on the Rainsense feature,the wipers must be set to oneof the five delay settings on themultifunction lever. Each of the fivesettings adjusts the sensitivity of thesensor.

Since different drivers havedifferent setting preferences, it isrecommended that the mid-rangesetting (position 3) be used initially.For more wipes, select the highersettings; for fewer wipes, select thelower settings located closer to theoff position on the turn signal/lanechange lever.

The sensor automatically controlsthe frequency of the wipes from theoff setting to the high speed settingaccording to the weather conditions.The wipers can be left in arainsense mode even when it is notraining.

When Rainsense is active, theheadlamps turn on automatically ifthe exterior lamp control is in theAUTO position and the wipers areactive.


Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers. The wipers willcontinue until the lever is releasedor the maximum wash time isreached.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis on the instrument panel above theclimate control system.

= (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press towash and wipe the rear window.

The rear window washer uses thesame reservoir as the windshieldwasher. Check the windshieldwasher reservoir level if the frontwindshield can be worked, but nofluid is sprayed when the rearwasher is activated. See WasherFluid on page 10‑22.

5 (Delay): Press to turn thedelayed wiping on or off.

CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone foryour location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.


To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TO SETCOMPASS ZONE: ## displays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.


If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass is set tothe variance zone in which thevehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING COMPASS :TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive thevehicle in tight circles at lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h) to completethe calibration. The DIC willdisplay COMPASSCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.


ClockTo set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.PressO to turn the radio on.

2. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:. Press the softkey located

below the selected tab.

. Press¨ SEEK,

or\ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

. Press© SEEK ors REV.

. Turn f counterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press Hwhile the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a fewseconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press H and then the softkeylocated below the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, andyear) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

The accessory power outlets arelocated on the rear of the centerstorage console and in the rearcargo compartment. There may be apower outlet located inside theinstrument panel storage area belowthe climate controls.

To use the outlets, remove thecover. When not in use, alwayscover the outlet with theprotective cap.


Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer/retailer foradditional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to your vehicle maydamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gages and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster

United States Base version shown, Canada and Uplevel similar


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver's door to show the oldmileage reading.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can record thenumber of miles, used in the UnitedStates, or kilometers, used inCanada, traveled for up to two trips.

Cycle between the odometer andtrip odometers A and B by pressingthe reset button located in the lowerright area of the speedometer. Pressthe reset button to tell how manymiles or kilometers have beenrecorded on either Trip A or Trip Bsince the trip odometer was last setback to zero.

To reset each trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button. Thereset button resets only the tripodometer that is being displayed.Each trip odometer must be resetindividually.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gage

United States Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage indicates how much fuel is leftin the tank.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There is stilla little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be refilled soon. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 5‑23for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.


Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of thesemeans the fuel gage is not workingproperly:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gagereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little moreor less than half the tank'scapacity to fill the tank.

. The gage moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gage takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, but it goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

For fuel tank capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

The driver safety belt reminder lightis on the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thedriver to fasten the safety belt. Thelight also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.


The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag'selectrical system for malfunctions.The light indicates if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. Formore information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑25.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

The airbag readiness light comes onwhen the vehicle is started, andflashes for a few seconds. The lightgoes out when the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson while driving, the airbag systemmay not work properly. Have thevehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light shouldflash for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately. If there is a problemwith the airbag system, an airbagDriver Information Center (DIC)message may also come on. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle from a distance, you maynot see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontal andseat‐mounted side impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.


{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while thislight is on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.


If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle's fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer/retailer for service assoon as possible.


Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected.. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑50. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Gasoline Specifications onpage 9‑48.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper testequipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electricalproblems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspection couldprevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:. The vehicle will not pass this

inspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.


. The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

The service vehicle soon lightcomes on if a condition exists thatmay require the vehicle to be takenin for service.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice as soon as possible.

Brake System WarningLight

United States Canada

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.


{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑53.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the ABS light stays on longer thana few seconds after engine isstarted, or comes on and stays onwhile driving, try resetting thesystem. To reset the system:

1. While driving, pull over when it issafe to do so.

2. Place the vehicle in P (PARK).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the ABS light remains on afterresetting the system or comes onagain while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the ABS light is on,but the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, the antilockbrakes are not working properly, butthe regular brakes are stillfunctioning. Have the vehicleserviced right away. If both brakelights are on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes, and there is aproblem with the regular brakes aswell. Have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑78.

All-Wheel-Drive Light

This light comes on when there is amalfunction in the All-Wheel Drive(AWD) system.


This light flashes when the AWDsystem is temporarily disabled.

For more information see All-WheelDrive on page 9‑38.

Power Steering WarningLight

For 4‐cylinder vehicles with ElectricPower Steering (EPS), this lightcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN as a check toshow it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the EPS light stays on, or comeson while driving, the EPS systemmay not be working. If this happens,see your dealer/retailer for service.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

The StabiliTrak® light comes onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

This light flashes while theStabiliTrack or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is working. The lightcomes on when the ESP has beenturned off and if there is a problemwith the StabiliTrak or the TCS. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑40 and StabiliTrak Systemon page 9‑41 for more information.

Traction Control System(TCS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

It also comes on when the TractionControl System (TCS) has beenturned off or when the ElectronicStability Program (ESP) is notready. If there is a problem with theTCS or the ESP, this light and theTCS warning light comes on at thesame time. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑40 andStabiliTrak System on page 9‑41for more information.


Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightThe engine coolant temperaturelight should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

If this light comes on and stays on,the engine has overheated. Pullover and see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tire pressuremonitoring system, this light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TirePressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC), canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑37 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the tireloading information label. See TirePressure on page 10‑50 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54 for moreinformation.


Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer/retailer.

Change Engine Oil Light

When the change engine oil lightcomes on, it means that service isrequired on the vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑8 for more information.

After the engine oil is changed theengine oil life system needs to bereset in order to turn off this light.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10 for more information.


Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light, below thefuel gage, comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

This light also comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. When fuel isadded, the light should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see VehicleSecurity on page 2‑9.

Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

This light , along with the serviceengine soon light displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance occurs. Stop thevehicle and turn off the ignition. Waitfor 10 seconds and restart thevehicle. This might correct thecondition.


The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. The performance could bereduced until the next time thevehicle is driven. If this light stayson, see your dealer/retailer as soonas possible for diagnosis and repair.

High-Beam on Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Low Washer FluidWarning Light

The low washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid on page 10‑22 for moreinformation.


Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑42 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

The door ajar light comes on whena door is open. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.

Gate Ajar Light

If the gate ajar light comes on, theliftgate is not completely closed.Driving with the liftgate open cancause carbon monoxide (CO) toenter the vehicle.

See Engine Exhaust on page 9‑34for more information.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All information appears in the DICdisplay located in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICdisplays the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also displays the compassdirection, outside air temperature,and shift position indicator at the topof the DIC display. If there is aproblem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display, thenumbers will be replaced with


dashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If an abnormal temperaturereading is displayed for an extendedperiod of time, consult yourdealer/retailer. Under certaincircumstances, especially when theengine is idling, a delay updatingthe temperature display is normal.

See Compass on page 5‑5 andAutomatic Transmission onpage 9‑35 for more information.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, below theheadlamp switch.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, and elapsedtime. Some vehicles also displayinstantaneous economy. Thecompass and outside temperaturewill also be shown in the display.The temperature will be shown in°F or °C depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings and tirepressure sensor learning forvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, compass zonesetting, compass recalibration onvehicles with this feature, coolanttemperature, and battery voltage.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑39 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.


Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIP A or TRIP B displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last resetfor the trip odometer. Pressing thetrip odometer reset stem will alsodisplay the trip odometer.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing the set/reset button while the trip odometeris displayed. You can also reset thetrip odometer while it is displayed bypressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehicle can bedriven without refueling. The displaywill show LOW if the fuel levelis low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even though

the same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”under Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑34.

Average Fuel Economy

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE FUEL ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) orkilometers per liter (km/L). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of mpg (L/100 km) (km/L)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. To reset theAVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY, pressand hold the set/reset button. Thedisplay will show zero.


Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELUSED displays. This display showsthe number of gallons (gal) orliters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset thefuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

Elapsed Time

Press the trip/fuel button untilELAPSED TIME displays. Thisdisplay can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while ELAPSED TIMEis displayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will record upto 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while ELAPSED TIMEis displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileELAPSED TIME is displayed.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

If the vehicle has this display, pressthe trip/fuel button until INSTANTFUEL ECONOMY displays. Thisdisplay shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg)or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). Unlike average fueleconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.


When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑33. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.Whenever the oil is changed the OilLife System will need to be reset. Toreset the system through the DIC,press and hold V while this displayis shown. When the system is resetthe display will show 100%OIL LIFEREMAINING.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRICunits. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

If your vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information buttonuntil the DIC displays FRONTTIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in aspecific tire will appear in thedisplay. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑37 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

For information on relearning tirepositions see “TPMS SensorMatching Process” under TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑54.


Relearn Remote Key

This display allows you to programRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle. When anew transmitter is programmed tothe vehicle, all remainingtransmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.

To program an RKE transmitter toyour vehicle:

1. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.

A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matchedand REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETE will be shown onthe display.

4. To program additionaltransmitters at this time, repeatStep 3.

Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersprogrammed to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑5 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑5 for more information.

Coolant Temperature

Press the vehicle info button untilthe coolant temperature isdisplayed. The temperature will beshown in °F or °C depending on theunits selected.

If the coolant temperature displayshows dashes instead of a value,there may be a problem with thevehicle. If this happens often, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Battery Voltage

Press the vehicle info button untilthe battery voltage is displayed.

If the battery voltage display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this happens often, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.


Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressany of the DIC buttons, or the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear them fromthe display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. Take any messages thatappear on the display seriously andremember that clearing themessages will only make themessages disappear, not correct theproblem.

You will find the possible messagesthat can be displayed and someinformation about them grouped bysubject in the following information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thecharging system detects that thebattery is being drained. You maynotice that the vehicle attempts toreduce the drain for you by turningoff accessories, such as interiorfans, rear defogger, and heatedseats. Turn off all accessories. If thevehicle is not running, start and runthe engine for at least 10 minutes toallow the battery to recharge. If theengine is running and the conditionpersists, see your dealer/retailerimmediately.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem or when the brake fluid levelis low. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18. Have the brakesystem serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

Compass Messages

CALIBRATING COMPASS:TURN IN CIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. See Compass onpage 5‑5 .

COMPASS CALIBRATIONCOMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass on page 5‑5.


Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message will display when thecruise control is set and it will showthe speed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑42 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thedriver door is not closed properly.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

If your vehicle has the remote startfeature, this message displaysalong with a chime when the hood isnot closed properly. Make sure thatthe hood is closed completely. SeeHood on page 10‑5. This messagedisplays while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.

This message continues to displayfor two seconds if it has not beenacknowledged when the engine isturned off. The message comesback on for two seconds if it hasbeen acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when theengine is turned off. If the conditionstill exists, the message reappearswhen the engine is turned on.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message will display when theliftgate is not closed properly. Closethe liftgate completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message will display when thepassenger doors are not closedproperly. Close the door completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor is automatically turnedoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.


ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speedabove normal idling speed. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20for more information.

This message displays along with acontinuous chime when the enginehas overheated. Stop and turn theengine off immediately to avoidsevere engine damage. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays whenservice is required for the vehicle.See your dealer/retailer. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

Acknowledging this message willnot reset the OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplay. That must be done at theOIL LIFE screen. See “OIL LIFE”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑25 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10 for moreinformation.


OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oilpressure is corrected. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 for moreinformation.

This message displays when thevehicle's engine oil pressure is low.The oil pressure light also appearson the instrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑22.

Stop the vehicle immediately, asengine damage can result fromdriving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible when this message isdisplayed.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGage on page 5‑11 and Filling theTank on page 9‑50 for moreinformation.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑15. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑50. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.


Key and Lock Messages

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE

This message displays whilematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “MATCHING TRANSMITTERSTO YOUR VEHICLE” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 and DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGCOMPLETE

This message displays whilematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “MATCHING TRANSMITTERSTO YOUR VEHICLE” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 and DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.

REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOBBATTERY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 .

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak®

system. A warning light alsoappears on the instrument panelcluster. See StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight on page 5‑20. See StabiliTrakSystem on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If thismessage still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have thesystem inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isnot functioning properly. A warninglight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light onpage 5‑20 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑40 formore information. Have the TCSserviced by your dealer/retailer assoon as possible.


STABILITRAK NOT READY

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may display and theStabiliTrak indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster may be onafter first driving the vehicle andexceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) for30 seconds. The StabiliTrak systemis not functional until the light hasturned off. See StabiliTrak Systemon page 9‑41 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turn offthe StabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock your vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheel

spin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 9‑22. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrakSystem on page 9‑41.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnsoff. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

This message only displays whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN anddisappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgentwarning appears.

Any of the following conditions maycause the TCS to turn off:. The TCS is turned off by

pressing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton. See StabiliTrak Systemon page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

. The battery is low.

. There is a TCS failure. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) turnson. See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑41 for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.


Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem detected in the airconditioning system. Have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, this message displays if aproblem has been detected with thepower steering. See Steering onpage 9‑5 for more information.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑43, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50. The DIC also shows the

tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25. If the tire pressure islow, the low tire pressure warninglight comes on. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑21.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORINGSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑21. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑54 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer/retailer.


TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Rotation on page 10‑57,Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑52, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50 for more information.

Transmission Messages

CHANGE TRANSMISSIONFLUID

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7.

This message displays when the lifeof the transmission fluid has expiredand it should be changed. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 and RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7for the proper fluid and changeintervals.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do notdrive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid orwhile the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.


Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and achime sounds as a reminder toturn off the turn signal if you driveyour vehicle for more than about1.2 km (3/4 mile) with a turn signalon. See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.


Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO SET DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

PORTUGUESE: All messages willappear in Portuguese.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑7 for moreinformation.


Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER DOOR AT KEY OUT:Only the driver's door will unlockwhen the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER DOOR IN PARK: Only thedriver's door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park) .

ALL DOORS AT KEY OUT: All ofthe doors will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

ALL DOORS IN PARK (default):All of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

VERIFICATION OFF: There will beno feedback when you press thelock button on the RKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION LIGHTS ONLY:The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button on theRKE transmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN ONLY: Thehorn will sound on the second pressof the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIFICATION HORN & LIGHTS(default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter, andthe horn will sound when the lockbutton is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previouscommand.

VERIFICATION NO CHANGE: Nochange will be made to this feature.The current setting will remain.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

VERIF LIGHTS OFF: The exteriorlamps will not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIF LIGHTS ON (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

VERIF NO CHANGE: No changewill be made to this feature. Thecurrent setting will remain.


DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors will be delayed.When locking the doors with thepower door lock switch and a dooris open, this feature will delaylocking the doors until five secondsafter the last door is closed. You willhear three chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.The key must be out of the ignitionfor this feature to work. You cantemporarily override delayed lockingby pressing the power door lockswitch twice or the lock button on

the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2‑7 formore information.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET DELAY DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.




EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

30 SECONDS: The exterior lampswill stay on for 30 seconds.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑4 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO SET REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO RESTOREDEFAULTS appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

NO CHANGE: The customizationfeatures will not be set to theirfactory default settings.



EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.


Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lightabove the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructionsbelow.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you in theprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale ofthe vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.


To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motorhead unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button. Donot release the Universal HomeRemote button or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.

4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays oncontinuously, the programming iscomplete and the garage doorshould move when the UniversalHome Remote button is pressedand released. There is no needto continue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

If the Universal Home Remoteindicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to aconstant light, continue with theprogramming Steps 6 through 8.

It may be helpful to have anotherperson assist with the remainingsteps.


6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, chosen in Step 3 tocontrol the garage door, fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. If the garage door does notmove, press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does notmove, press and hold the samebutton a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1, asthis will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal HomeRemote System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for Universal Home Remoteto pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures,regardless of where you live,replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with thefollowing:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release every


two seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. TheUniversal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Home Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButton

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.


2 NOTES

Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

9 (Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

6-2 Lighting

Lamps On Reminder

A warning chime sounds, if thedriver door is opened while theignition is off and the lamps are on.

Wiper‐Activated Headlamps

The headlamps and parking lampsturn on automatically if the exteriorlamp control is set in the AUTOposition and the windshield wipersare turned on and have completedeight wipe cycles.

When the ignition is turned off, thewiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off. They also turnoff if the windshield wiper control isturned off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows use of thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front that you want to pass.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change levertowards you, and release.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)system makes the low-beamheadlamps come on in daylightwhen the following conditionsare met:. The engine is running,. The exterior lamp band is in

AUTO, and. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

Lighting 6-3

When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker,instrument panel lights and otherlamps will not be on.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position, theregular headlamps will come on.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When the headlamps are turned off,the regular lamps also turn off, andthe low-beam headlamps turn on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be used when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel or theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash and thenrelease, to signal a lane change.The turn signal flashesautomatically three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If a bulb isnot burned out, check the fuse. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10‑40 and for burned-outbulbs.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is on the instrument panelnext to the exterior lamps switch.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off.

The fog lamp indicator in theinstrument panel comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps must be on, before thefog lamps can be turned on.

If the exterior lamp control is set toAUTO mode, the parking lamps andlow‐beam headlamps come onsimultaneously when the fog lampsare turned on.

When the high-beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps turn offautomatically. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe thumbwheel for this feature ison the left side of the steering wheelnext to the exterior lamps control.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right orleft to brighten or dim the instrumentpanel lights.

Dome Lamps* (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthis button on the overhead consoleto keep the dome lamps and otherinterior lamps turned off while anydoor is open. Press this buttonagain to return it to the out positionand the lamps automatically comeon when any door is opened.

+ (On/Off): Press this button toturn the dome lamps on and offwhile the doors are closed.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console.

To turn the reading lamps on or off,press the button located next toeach lamp.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp override button isin the out position, the lamps insidethe vehicle automatically come onwhen any door is opened or whenthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)unlock button is pressed. After thedoor is opened the lights remain onand stay on for 20 seconds after thedoors are closed, or until the key isput into the ignition and turned tothe ACC/ACCESSORY position.The lights will then gradually dimuntil they are no longer lit.

6-6 Lighting

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gage or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If any interior or exterior lamp is lefton and the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off after10 minutes.

Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with theinfotainment system features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the infotainment system can playeven after the ignition is turned off.

7-2 Infotainment System

See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑29 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService, MP3, and RDSFeatures): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3 or WMA song.


If information is available during XM,CD, MP3 or WMA playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, "NO INFO" displays.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol labels display.

2. Continue pressing the f knob tohighlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton underthe desired label.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the\ FWD, or

s REV button.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREBlabel for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, pressthe EQ button until Manual displaysor manually adjust the bass,midrange, or treble by pressing thef knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control labels display.

2. Continue pressing the f knob tohighlight the desired label,or press the pushbutton underthe desired label.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained.

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the\ FWD, or

s REV button.

To quickly adjust balance or fade tothe middle position, press thepushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds andthe level adjusts to the middleposition.


To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

Chime Volume

The radio may be used to adjust thevehicle's chime level. If the radiocan be used to change the volumelevel of the chime, press and holdthe sixth FAV pushbutton with theignition on and the radio power off.The volume level changes betweenNormal and Loud. The selectedvolume level appears on the radiodisplay.

Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio orchime module will disable vehiclechimes.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® system haslocked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.


© SEEK¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station.

To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for a few seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ SatelliteRadio Service, MP3, and RDSFeatures): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS station, XMstation, or MP3 song. If informationis available, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM stations, if equipped.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.


To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing theradio station frequency labelsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

Satellite RadioThe vehicle may have XM™Satellite Radio Service.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. For moreinformation, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press andhold© or¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.


Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. To navigate through thecategories, do one of thefollowing:. Press the CAT button.

. Press thes REV or\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob.

4. To tune to a station in theselected category, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the pushbutton belowthe right or left arrows onthe display.

. Press the© SEEK or¨ SEEK button.

5. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orthe BAND button to display thefavorites again.

Removing XM Categories

Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.To remove an undesired category:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the XM CAT label.

3. Turn the f knob, press the© SEEK or¨ SEEK button,or thes REV or\ FWDbutton to display the category tobe removed.

4. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the Remove tab until thecategory name along with theword Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or bypressing the pushbutton under theRestore All label.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 5 mph (8 km/h).


Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑3.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original mainradio screen showing theradio station frequency labelsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.


Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.


Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just

as with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.


Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT : Press to eject the discthat is currently playing. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The disc can beremoved. If the disc is not removed,after several seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK¨ : Press© to go tothe start of the current track, if morethan ten seconds on the CD haveplayed. Press¨ to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thepushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.


BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player the

CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the

surface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Playing an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RWdisc. For more information on howto play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RWdisc, see MP3 on page 7‑13.


CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out, itcould be:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message,write it down and provide it to yourdealer/retailer when reporting theproblem.

MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc

The radio plays MP3 files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or avariable bit rate. Song title, artistname, and album are available fordisplay by the radio when recordedusing ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. Bydefault the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignoresthe MP3 files. Pressing the CAT(category) button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 Supported File and FolderStructure

To burn an MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:. Make sure the MP3 files are

recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

. Do not mix standard audio andMP3 files on one disc.

. The CD player is able to readand play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.


. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Avoid subfolders. Thesystem can support up toeight subfolders deep, however,keep the total number of foldersto a minimum in order to reducethe complexity and confusion intrying to locate a particular folderduring playback.

. Make sure playlists have a .m3uor .wpl extension, other fileextensions may not work.

. Minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist names. Longfile, folder, or playlist names,or a combination of a largenumber of files and folders,or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to the

maximum number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions. Toplay a large number of files,folders, playlists or sessions,minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Longnames also take up more spaceon the display, potentially gettingcut off.

. Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe previous and next folderbuttons, the tune knob, or the SEEKarrows. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RWthat was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If aCD-R or CD-RW contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders,50 playlists, and 255 files, theplayer can access and navigate upto the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW is treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressedaudio files, the directory displaysas F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles. The empty folder does notdisplay.


No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functionsdo not display on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder down andup buttons searches playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder.When the radio displays the nameof the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has beenplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode is chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track namedisplays.

File System and Naming

The song name that is displayed isthe song name that is contained inthe ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created by WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treated asspecial folders containingcompressed audio song files.


Playing an MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the CD-R or CD-RW currentlyplaying.

© SEEK¨ : Press the left arrowto go to the start of the current MP3file, if more than ten seconds haveplayed. Press the right arrow to goto the next MP3 file. If either arrowis held or pressed multiple times,the player continues movingbackward or forward through MP3files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned under theFolder label to go to the first track inthe previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thepushbutton positioned under theFolder label to go to the first track inthe next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quicklywithin an MP3 file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within an MP3 file. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, the MP3 files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, press thepushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Use themusic navigator feature to play MP3files on the CD-R or CD-RW inorder by artist or album. Press thepushbutton located below the musicnavigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist andalbum ID3 tag information. It cantake several minutes to scan thedisc depending on the number ofMP3 files recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW. The radio can beginplaying while it is scanning the discin the background. When the scanis finished, the CD-R or CD-RWbegins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned,the player defaults to playing MP3files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on thesecond line of the display betweenthe arrows. Once all songs by thatartist are played, the player movesto the next artist in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R/CD-RW andbegins playing MP3 files by thatartist. To listen to MP3 files byanother artist, press the pushbutton


located below either arrow button.The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button untilthe desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name is displayed on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album are played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins playing MP3files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3 playback.

Auxiliary DevicesThe radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is not anaudio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. An externalaudio device such as an iPod™,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, etc. can be connected tothe auxiliary input jack for use asanother audio source.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cableto the radio's front auxiliary inputjack. When a device is connected,press the radio CD/AUX button tobegin playing audio from the deviceover the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable device ifthe volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.


Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

J / 0 (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

− /K (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call and to cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the in‐vehicleBluetooth system first and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.


Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. The in‐vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in‐vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold J / 0 fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetooth ready”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. This

name will be used to indicatewhich phone is connected. Thesystem then confirms the nameprovided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices. If aphone is connected to thevehicle, the system will say “Isconnected” after the connectedphone.


Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone to bedeleted. If the phone name isunknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete<phone name>? Yes or No”followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with “OK,deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasewait while I search for otherphones”.. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tags thatare shared between the Bluetoothand OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory

Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.


3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.. If the system recognizes

the number it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeatsthe phone number.

. If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phonenumber, it responds with“Store” and repeats thenumber followed by “Pleasesay yes or no”. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber to be re‐entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.

4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.


5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory” andthen plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list iscomplete, the system returns tothe main menu.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with“Would you like to delete, <nametag>? Please say yes or no”.. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”

Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags forOnStar (if present).


To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. Thesystem responds with “You areabout to delete all name tagsstored in your phone directoryand your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you wantto do this? Please say yesor no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number. If the numberis not correct, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber to be re‐entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digitit heard followed by a tone.


4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber.

. If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right nametag, it confirms the nametag followed by a tone.If the name tag is correct,say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber. If the name tag isnot correct, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thename tag to be re‐entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re‐dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. Thesystem responds with “Re‐dialusing <phone name>” and dialsthe last number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press J / 0 and begin speakingto answer the call.

. Press − /K to ignore a call.


Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press J / 0 to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press J / 0 again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

. Press − /K to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press J / 0 . Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three‐way call”. Thesystem responds with “Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press J / 0 to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press − /K to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press J / 0 . The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.


Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after thekey is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press J / 0 for morethan two seconds. The audioswitches from the cell phone to thevehicle.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numberscan be programmed into thephonebook for retrieval during menudriven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.


3. Say the number to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dial tonesare sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending Number”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds with “Say aname tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>, Please sayyes or no?” followed by atone. If the name tag iscorrect, say “Yes”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for FCC information.


2 NOTES

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate controlsystem functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Recirculation


8-2 Climate Controls

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. To turn thefan off, turn the left knob all the waycounterclockwise. In any settingother than off, the fan runscontinuously with the ignition on.There will be some airflownoticeable from the various outletswhen driving, even with the fan inthe off position. To turn off the aircompletely, turn the fan to9 andselect the recirculation button.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andthe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.

When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in floor mode. Thishelps prevent window fogging.

-(Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode off andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

0(Defrost): Removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.Air is directed to the windshield andthe side window outlets. In thismode, the system turns therecirculation mode off automaticallyand runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air isat or below freezing. Recirculationmode cannot be selected while indefrost mode. This helps preventwindow fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

#(Air Conditioning): Press to turnthe air conditioning system on or off.An indicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is on. Theair conditioning can be selected inany mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature isabove freezing. A flashing indicatorlight indicates that the airconditioning compressor is currentlynot available.


On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool downand helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days,select the following settingstogether:

1. SelectH mode.

2. Select; .

3. Turn the# on.

4. Select the coolest temperatureand highest fan speed.

5. Once the vehicle's interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select recirculationmode for enhanced cooling.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air inside of the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

; (Outside Air): Press to turn theoutside air mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that outsideair is on. Air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout the vehicle.The outside air mode can be usedwith all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode.Pressing this button will cancel therecirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool or heat the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity and cool outsidetemperatures since this may resultin increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not availablein floor, defog or defrost modes andwill shut off automatically andchange to outside air. The indicatorwill flash if the button is selected inany of these modes. This helpsprevent window fogging andmoisture building up inside thevehicle.


Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window is activated.

The rear window defogger stays onfor approximately 10 minutes afterthe button is pressed, unless theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off again. At highervehicle speeds, the defogger maystay on continuously. The defoggercan also be turned off by turning offthe engine.

For vehicles with the remote startfeature, the rear defogger willautomatically turn on.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature and if it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off and the reardefogger automatically turns on.


Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. For vehicles with the remote start feature, the climate controlsystem functions as part of the remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3.

United States version shown, Canada version similar.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Recirculation


Automatic Operation

This climate control systemautomatically maintains the desiredtemperature inside the vehicle. Donot cover the sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield or the sensor grille belowthe climate control faceplate. Thesetwo sensors help regulate the insideair temperature.

AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn thefan knob to AUTO for the system toautomatically adjust the fan speedto reach the desired insidetemperature.

Temperature Control: Select thedesired cabin air temperaturebetween 60‐90°F (16‐32°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.


AUTO (Automatic Air DeliveryMode): Turn the air delivery modeknob to AUTO for the system toautomatically control the direction ofthe airflow to help reach the desiredinside temperature.

The system automatically controlsthe air inlet to supply the outside airor recirculated inside air needed toheat or cool the vehicle faster. Therecirculation button indicator light islit whenever the recirculation modeis on.

Press the outside air button tochange to outside air. However, therecirculation mode may turn back onautomatically.

In cold weather, if the fan and airdelivery modes are in automatic, thesystem starts at lower fan speeds toavoid directing cold air into thevehicle until warmer air is available.

The climate control systemdirects air to the floor, but mayautomatically change modes as thevehicle warms up to maintain thechosen temperature setting. Thelength of time needed to warm theinterior depends on the outsidetemperature and inside temperatureof the vehicle.

Manual Operation

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. To turn thefan off, turn the left knob to the9position. In any setting other thanoff, the fan runs continuously withthe ignition on. The fan must beturned on to run the air conditioningcompressor. There will be someairflow noticeable from the variousoutlets when driving, even with thefan in the off position. To turn off theair completely, turn the fan to9and select the recirculation button.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature. Select the desiredcabin air temperature between60‐90°F (16‐32°C). Typically, thebest setting is near 75°F (23°C).Choosing the coldest or warmesttemperature setting does not causethe system to heat or cool anyfaster.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield.


When this mode is selected, thesystem turns the recirculation modeoff. Recirculation mode cannot beselected while in floor mode. This isto help prevent window fogging.

-(Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemturns the recirculation mode off andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside air is at or belowfreezing. Recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in defog mode.This helps prevent window fogging.

0(Defrost): Removes fog or frostfrom the windshield more quickly.Air is directed to the windshield andthe side window outlets. In thismode, the system turns therecirculation mode off automaticallyand runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside air isat or below freezing. Recirculationmode cannot be selected while indefrost mode. This helps preventwindow fogging.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

#(Air Conditioning): Press to turnthe air conditioning system on or off.An indicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is on. Theair conditioning can be selected inany mode as long as the fan is onand the outside temperature isabove freezing. A flashing indicatorlight indicates that the airconditioning compressor is currentlynot available.

On hot days, use the automatic fanand automatic air delivery modesettings and the vehicle will reachthe desired temperature morequickly. The desired fan and airdelivery mode settings can still beadjusted manually. Open thewindows to let the hot inside airescape, then close them. This helpsreduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down and helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine.

; (Outside Air): Press to turn theoutside air mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that outsideair is on. Air from outside the vehiclewill circulate throughout the vehicle.The outside air mode can be usedwith all modes, but it cannot beused with the recirculation mode.Pressing this button will cancel therecirculation mode.


@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation mode. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool or heat the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity and cool outsidetemperatures since this may resultin increased window fogging.If window fogging is experienced,select the defrost mode.

Recirculation mode is not availablein floor, defog or defrost modes andwill shut off automatically andchange to outside air. If the button isselected in any of these modes, theindicator will flash. This helpsprevent window fogging andmoisture building up inside thevehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatit is activated.

The rear window defogger stays onfor approximately 10 minutes afterthe button is pressed, unless theignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again, the defogger onlyruns for approximately five minutesbefore turning off. At higher vehiclespeeds, the defogger may stay oncontinuously. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning off theengine.

For vehicles with the remote startfeature, the rear defogger willautomatically turn on when remotestart is activated.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature and if it is activated, theclimate control system heats andcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off.


Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airoutlets to adjust the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Do not use any non-GMapproved hood deflectors thatcould adversely affect theperformance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for replacementintervals. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑9.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Remove the six screws fromaround the glove box and detachthe three inner clips from theglove box.

2. Lower the loosened glove boxhousing.


3. Unplug both wire cables andremove the glove box.

4. Remove the air filter coverscrew.

5. Remove the filter cover and pullout the old air filter.

6. Install the new air filter.

7. Reinstall the air filter cover.Reconnect the wire cabling andre‐install the glove box.

See your dealer/retailer if additionalassistance is needed.

Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driving Environment . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Vehicle Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-19Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-22Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-27Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-30Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-35Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Object Detection SystemsRear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-48California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Driver BehaviorWhenever we drive, we are takingon an important responsibility. Thisis true for any motorvehicle — passenger car, van, truck,sport utility. Driver behavior, thedriving environment, and thevehicle's design all affect how well avehicle performs. But statistics showthat the most important factor, byfar, is how we drive.

Knowing how these three factorswork together can help youunderstand how your vehiclehandles and what you can do toavoid many types of crashes,including a rollover crash.

The single most important thing isthis: everyone in the vehicle,including the driver, should buckleup. See Safety Belts on page 3‑10.In fact, most serious injuries andfatalities to unbelted occupants canbe reduced or prevented by the use

of safety belts. In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt. In addition,avoiding excessive speed, suddenor abrupt turns, and drunken oraggressive driving can help maketrips safer and avoid the possibilityof a crash, especially a rollovercrash. This section provides manyuseful tips to help you drive moresafely.

Driving EnvironmentYou can also help avoid a rollover orother type of crash by beingprepared for driving in inclementweather, at night, or during othertimes where visibility or traction maybe limited, such as on curves,slippery roads, or hilly terrain.Unfamiliar surroundings can alsohave hidden hazards.

To help you learn more aboutdriving in different conditions, thissection contains information about

city, freeway, and off-road driving,as well as other hints for driving invarious weather conditions.

Vehicle DesignAccording to the U.S. Department ofTransportation, utility vehicles havea significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. Utilityvehicles do have higher groundclearance and a narrower track orshorter wheelbase than passengercars, to make them more capablefor off-road driving. Specific designcharacteristics like these give thedriver a better view of the road, butalso give utility vehicles a highercenter of gravity than other types ofvehicles. This means that youshould not expect a utility vehicle tohandle the same way a vehicle witha lower center of gravity, like a car,would in similar situations.

But driver behavior factors are farmore often the cause of a utilityvehicle rollover than areenvironmental or vehicle factors.


Safe driver behavior andunderstanding the environment inwhich you will be driving can helpavoid a rollover crash in any type ofvehicle, including utility vehicles.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 3‑10.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving. Inrecent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.


Medical research shows that alcoholin a person's system can makecrash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord,or heart. This means that whenanyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help tocontrol the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑40.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑18.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as twoor three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.


If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If the vehicle has the electric powersteering system and the enginestalls while driving, the powersteering assist system will continue

to operate until you are able to stopthe vehicle. If power steering assistis lost because the electric powersteering system is not functioning,the vehicle can be steered but it willtake more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for anextended amount of time, you maynotice a reduced amount of powersteering assist. The normal amountof power steering assist shouldreturn shortly after a few normalsteering movements.

The electric power steering systemdoes not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems and/or theService Vehicle Soon light comeson, contact your dealer/retailer forservice repairs.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If the vehicle has the hydraulicpower steering system and powersteering assist is lost because theengine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, thevehicle can be steered but it willtake more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.


Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑4 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front


tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.


Off-Road DrivingVehicles with all‐wheel drive can beused for off‐road driving. Vehicleswithout all‐wheel drive should not bedriven off-road except on a level,solid surface.

Many of the vehicle design featuresthat help make the vehicle moreresponsive on paved roads duringpoor weather conditions also helpmake it better suited for off‐road usethan conventional passengervehicles. The vehicle does not havefeatures usually thought to benecessary for extended or severeoff‐road use such as specialunderbody shielding and transfercase low gear range.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving. At

the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions to helpmake off-road driving safer andmore enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire is fully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation about all-wheel-drivevehicles in this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you will bedriving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.


Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22 and Tires onpage 10‑43.

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. Werecognize these concerns and urgeevery off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practice thatcould damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.


. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle over drygrass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sure toread the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw you outof position. This could cause youto lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or offthe road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.


Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.

Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.


Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment andan understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decide ifit is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. Ona large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will nothave to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the hill

and try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.


{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of a hillat full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop the

vehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmission toP (Park) and restart the engine.Then, shift to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill asstraight as possible inR (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.


Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This will notwork. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly and couldgo out of control.

. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough to stallthe vehicle, it is steep enough tocause it to roll over. If youcannot make it up the hill, backstraight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill side and stay clear ofthe path the vehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill? Will I

be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go down a hillsafely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to doall the work. Descend slowly,keeping the vehicle under control atall times.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.


Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.

Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriously

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumbleend over end. But when drivingacross an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distancebetween the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.


If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill. Thisshould help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.

Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on thedownhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not get goodtraction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand

dunes, the tires will tend to sink intothe sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer theworst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice and youand your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.


Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do not tryit if it is deep enough to cover thewheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑18.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, axles,and exhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.


Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑43.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.


. Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

. Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. You

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something could be inyour lane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.


Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑38 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.


{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(two inches) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

around the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.


If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑64.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any stabilitysystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If the vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑78.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.


{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑43 and TirePressure on page 10‑50 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.


Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑56for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).


Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.


Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowerarea of the center pillar (B-Pillar)on the driver side of the vehicle.

The label tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as you can. Tryto spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500miles(805 km). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200miles (322 km) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑56 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.


Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply theregular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer/retailer.

LOCK/OFF: This position locks theignition. It also locks the steeringwheel and the transmission. Thekey can only be removed in LOCK/OFF. The shift lever must be inP (Park) to turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, the vehicle needsservice.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories oritems plugged into the accessorypower outlets.

Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

ON/RUN: This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position.If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionswith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.


Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned to the LOCKposition:. Outside Mirror. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped). Radio

The outside mirror, power windowsand sunroof will function until a dooris opened.

The radio will function until thedriver door is opened.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.


2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat these steps.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C ( 0°F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. Somemodels may have an internalthermostat in the cord which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperatures above−18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The enginecoolant heater cord is locatednear the air cleaner box on thepassenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.


{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑56.

To shift into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑39 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.


Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave an automatictransmission vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure the vehicle is inP (Park) and the parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it. Afteryou have moved the shift lever intoP (Park), hold the brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pushing the button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift into P (Park) properly,the weight of the vehicle may puttoo much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it

difficult to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park on page 9‑31.

Move the shift lever out of P (Park)before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).


Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shift lockrelease is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑34.


{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑31.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑53.

AutomaticTransmissionThe shift lever is located on theconsole between the seats.

There are several different positionsfor the automatic transmission.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑31. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑53.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply theregular brakes first and then press


the shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannotshift out of P (Park), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into P (Park) asyou maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting Out ofPark on page 9‑33.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑22.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving with the automatictransmission. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph),push the accelerator all theway down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑7.


M (Manual): This position allowsyou to change gears similar to amanual transmission. If the vehiclehas this feature, see ManualShift Mode.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Manual Mode

Manual Shift Mode (MSM)(Automatic Transmission)

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

The six-speed transmission willdownshift to a lower gear andthe instrument panel will displaythe gear range selected.If equipped with a 4-speedtransmission it will display a 3 forthird gear range.

When coming to a stop in themanual position, the vehicle willautomatically shift to1 (First) gear.

2. Press the plus (+) button toupshift or the minus (-) button todownshift.

While using the MSM feature thevehicle will have sportierperformance. You can use this whendriving hilly roads to stay in gearlonger or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allow youto shift into a gear range appropriatefor the vehicle speed.. The transmission will not

automatically shift to the nexthigher gear range withoutpressing the button on the shifterhandle.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed is too high.

If the vehicle does not respond to agear change, or detects a problemwith the transmission, the range ofgears may be reduced and theMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑15 MalfunctionIndicator Lamp .


Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveWith this feature, engine power isalways sent to all four wheels. It isfully automatic, and adjusts itself asneeded for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on system, replacethe compact spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10‑73for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑19.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.


Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. The ABS pump or motormight be heard operating, and thebrake pedal might be felt to pulsate,but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located inthe center console between thefront seats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition isin ON/RUN, the brake systemwarning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Release the parking brake beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.


Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.This is especially useful in slipperyroad conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that any ofthe drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tolimit wheel spin and also reducesengine power. The system may beheard or felt while it is working, butthis is normal.

This light will flash when TCS islimiting wheel spin.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. See If the Vehicleis Stuck on page 9‑22 for moreinformation.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the instrument panel.

Press and release this button to turnoff TCS. The TCS warning light willbe displayed on the instrumentpanel cluster. The traction controlsystem can be turned back on bypressing the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

If the system is limiting wheel spinwhen the button is pressed, thesystem will not turn off until there isno longer a current need to limitwheel spin. The system can beturned back on at any time bypressing the button again. If theTCS light does not come on, TCSmay not be functioning properly andthe vehicle should be serviced atyour dealer/retailer.


Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle'sperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 formore information.

StabiliTrak SystemThe vehicle has a stability controlsystem called StabiliTrak whichcombines antilock brake, tractionand stability control systems andhelps the driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a diifferencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

This light is located on theinstrument panel cluster.

It will flash when StabiliTrak is bothon and activated.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, this light will be on solid.When the light is on solid, thesystem will not assist the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The StabiliTrak systemautomatically comes on wheneverthe vehicle is started. To assist thedriver with vehicle directionalcontrol, especially in slippery road

conditions, the system shouldalways be left on. StabiliTrak can beturned off if needed.

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak button is located on theinstrument panel.

TCS can be turned off or turned onby pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button. To disable bothStabiliTrak and TCS, press and holdthe button until the TCS/StabiliTrakwarning light turns on solid.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it.


StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system. TheTCS/StabiliTrak warning light will beon solid to warn the driver thatStabiliTrak is disabled and requiresservice. If the problem does notclear itself after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑42.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

On vehicles with the StabiliTrak®

feature, the system may begin tolimit wheel spin while you are usingcruise control. If this happens, thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak Systemon page 9‑41.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{ WARNING

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.


The cruise control buttons are onthe left side of the steering wheel.

E (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off. Anindicator light comes on.

RES+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up to resume a setspeed or to accelerate to a higherspeed.

−SET(Set/Coast): Press thethumbwheel to set a speed or movethe thumbwheel down to decreasethe speed.

To set a speed:

1. PressE to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on thebutton comes on.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. The indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster goesout when the cruise is no longerengaged. To return to the previouslyset speed, press the thumbwheel uptoward RES+ briefly when thevehicle has reached a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more.

This accelerates the vehicle to thepreviously selected speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

To increase the cruise speed whileusing cruise control:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and then releasethe switch.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES+ briefly and thenrelease it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

. Use the accelerator pedal toreach the desired speed andmove the thumbwheel towards−SET. The new desired speedmust be greater than theprevious set speed by at least8 km/h (5 mph).


Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready engaged,. Move the thumbwheel toward

−SET and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, move the thumbwheeltoward −SET briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle's speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,

you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle's speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. For some vehiclesthe transmission may automaticallydownshift when going down hills tohelp maintain the vehicle's speed.When the brakes are applied thecruise control shuts off.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to disengagethe cruise control:. Step lightly on the brake pedal;

when cruise control disengages,the indicator light on theinstrument panel clustergoes out.

. PressE to turn off the cruisecontrol system.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the insiderear view mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rear view mirror aftera four second delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, the vehicle must be inR (Reverse), then press and releasethe button located on the back ofthe mirror on the passenger side.

The video display will default backto on when the ignition is cycled,or the vehicle is put back inR (Reverse).


Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located in the rear ofthe vehicle.

The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark, or there is not enoughlight at the rear of the vehicle.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.


. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the videodisplay will turn blue.

During any wire harness or camerafault condition, the display will beblue while the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or until the conditionsreturn to normal.

If the display is turned off bypressing and releasing the buttonlocated the back of the inside rearview mirror on the passenger side, itwill default back to on when theignition is cycled, or the vehicle isput back in R (Reverse).

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. The


VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, youcould choose to use middle grade89 octane unleaded gasoline. If theoctane rating is less than 87, anaudible knocking noise, commonlyreferred to as spark knock, might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code P) or the 3.5L V6 engine(VIN Code N), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane rating

is less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See FuelAdditives on page 9‑49 foradditional information.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is

advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer/retailer.


Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.


The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right. To avoid fuel contact onthe painted surface of the vehiclewhen filling the fuel tank, place thetethered cap on the fuel filler door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑82.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would

allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑15.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer/retailer. The wrong type fuel capmight not fit properly, mightcause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light, and could damagethe fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑15.


Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer/retailer ortowing retailer for assistance withpreparing the vehicle for towing atrailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips.

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see Trailer Towing.

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see TowingEquipment.

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑78. For information on


towing the vehicle behind anothervehicle — such as a motorhome,see Recreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑78.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑56. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

. Do not tow a trailer when theoutside temperature is above38°C (100°F).


Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer won't strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.


Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) fora few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatic

transmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.


Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt. *GCWR

2WD— 2.4L L4 Engine 3.91 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 438 kg (5,375 lbs)

2WD— 3.6L V6 Engine 2.77 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs)

AWD— 3.5L V6 Engine 2.77 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)

AWD— 3.6L V6 Engine 2.77 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑4 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,

equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22


If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights are

proper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle.

It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg(850 lbs)) and because the weight isapplied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, as muchas 1.5 times as much. The weight atthe rear axle could be 386 kg(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).


Since the rear axle already weighs1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg(1,275 lbs) brings the total to1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 136 kg (300 lbs) could beadded to the front axle weight and181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs) and you might think318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)

should be subtracted from thetrailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailerwould only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limited toless than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effect onthe rear axle must still beconsidered. Because the rear axlenow weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on therear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actualweight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)of tongue weight that can behandled. Since tongue weight isusually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, expect that thelargest trailer the vehicle canproperly handle is 2 722 kg(6,000 lbs).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.


Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, dirt,water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustmay get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 9‑34.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If the vehicle istowing a trailer and the systemdetects that the trailer is swaying,the vehicle's brakes are appliedwithout the driver pressing the brakepedal. The TCS/StabiliTrak warninglight will flash on the instrumentpanel cluster to notify the driver toreduce speed. If the trailercontinues to sway, StabiliTrak willreduce engine torque to help slowthe vehicle.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle'sperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 formore information.


Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle and the damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle'swarranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep othercomponents from working asthey should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑39 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑40.


2 NOTES

Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Ignition TransmissionLock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation . . . . 10-52

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57When It Is Time forNew Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

10-2 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-78Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories to the vehicle can affectvehicle performance and safety,including such things as airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function withother systems on the vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer canaccessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuineGM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑40.

10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑41.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑10.

Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located under theinstrument panel on the driverside of the vehicle. 2. Then go to the front of the

vehicle and lift up on thesecondary hood release lever.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4L L4 Engine

A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑14.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out ofView). See “When to AddEngine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑23.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See “Checking Coolant” underEngine Coolant on page 10‑15.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

H. See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑38.

I. See Battery on page 10‑25.

J. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Vehicle Care 10-7

3.5L V6 Engine (3.6L V6 Engine similar)

A. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Out of View). See PowerSteering Fluid on page 10‑21.

C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑14.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10‑8.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

F. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

G. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Out ofView). See Brakes onpage 10‑23.

H. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

J. See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑38.

K. See Battery on page 10‑25.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping thetip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark, add at leastone liter/quart of the recommendedoil. This section explains whatkind of oil to use. For engine oilcrankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above the uppermark that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicates that theoil has been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always usean oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M.

10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thestarburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.

For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil lightcomes on. See Change Engine OilLight on page 5‑22. Change the oilas soon as possible within the next1 000 km (600miles). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change isnecessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset.Your dealer/retailer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and resetthe system. It is also important tocheck the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

The Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based onvehicle use. Whenever the oil ischanged, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil changeis required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to achange engine oil message beingturned on, reset the system.

Vehicle Care 10-11

After changing the engine oil, resetthe system:

1. Press the DIC vehicleinformation button to display OILLIFE REMAINING on the DIC.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑25 and EngineOil Messages on page 5‑33.

2. Press the DIC Set/Reset buttonfor during 5 seconds to reset theoil life at 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the change engine oil light isnot on, the system is reset.

If the change engine oil lightcomes on again and stays on for30 seconds at the next ignitioncycle, it did not reset. The systemneeds to be reset again.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

10-12 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer and have it repairedas soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑7.

For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines,the transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.

See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filterremove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

Vehicle Care 10-13

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Remove the clamp on the airduct hose.

2. Disconnect the hose.

3. Remove the four bolts on theside of the air cleaner assembly.

4. Turn the cover upward todisengage the cover hinges.

5. Remove the air cleaner coverassembly and air filter element.

6. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.

If the air filter element is dirty,you should replace it. If it is onlydusty, it may be cleaned byblowing compressed air throughit from the clean side.

Make sure you are away fromthe engine compartment whencleaning the air filter withcompressed air.

Wipe all dust from inside of thehousing and inspect the aircleaner and air outlet duct forcracks, cuts and deterioration.The air outlet duct must bereplaced if damaged.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 toreinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover and air duct hose.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off,and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemWhen it is safe to lift the hood:

2.4L L4 Engine shown, 3.5LV6 and3.6LV6 Engines similar

A. Electric Engine Fan

B. Coolant Surge Tank

C. Pressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is hot, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should bebetween the MIN and MAX lines.If it is not, you may have a leak atthe radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Vehicle Care 10-15

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, theengine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first.Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL®

(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in your vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000 miles),whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant will:. Give freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F).. Give boiling protection up to

129°C (265°F).

. Protect against rust andcorrosion.

. Help keep the proper enginetemperature.

. Let the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX‐COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000miles(50 000 km) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolantin the vehicle.

10-16 Vehicle Care

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL® coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If you usethis coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

engine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core,and other parts.

If you have to add coolant morethan four times a year, have yourdealer/retailer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehicle'scooling system, the vehiclecould be damaged. Use only theproper mixture of the enginecoolant listed in this manualfor the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 formore information.

Vehicle Care 10-17

Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located on thedriver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

{ WARNING

Turning the surge tank pressurecap when the engine and radiatorare hot can allow steam andscalding liquids to blow out andburn you badly. Never turn thesurge tank pressure cap— evena little—when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the surge tank, but only when theengine is cool. See below forinstructions on “How to Add Coolantto the Coolant Surge Tank”.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight andfully seated.

10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visible inthe surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not atbetween the MIN and MAX lines,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before youdo it. See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑15 for more information.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle's coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

Vehicle Care 10-19

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolantsurge tank pressure cap whenthe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure capand upper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.

This will allow any pressure stillleft to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressurecap slowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL® coolantmixture, to between the MIN andMAX lines.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches between the MINand MAX lines.

5. Then replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the surge tankwhen the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer/retailer.

10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperaturewarning light on your vehicle'sinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 5‑21.

If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan cause serious injury, even ifthe hood is opened just a little.Stay away from the engine ifsteam is seen or heard comingfrom it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

until it cools down. Wait until thereis no sign of steam or coolantbefore opening the hood.

If driving continues when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. Someonecould get badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engine hascooled.

Notice: Driving the vehicle whenthere is no coolant in the coolantoverflow recovery bottle, canbadly damage the engine.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If there is an overheat warning withno sign of steam, try this for aminute or so:

1. If there is an air conditioner andit is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on the heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load. If ina traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral);otherwise, shift to the highestgear possible while driving.

Vehicle Care 10-21

If the overheat warning is no longeron, the vehicle can be driven. Justto be safe, drive slower for aboutten minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, drive normally.

If the warning continues and thevehicle is not stopped, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning continues,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

The decision may be made to not liftthe hood but to get service helpright away.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

Power steering fluid is used in allvehicles with V6 engines. Vehicleswith the 4-cylinder engine haveelectric power steering and does notuse power steering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid,do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove engine oil fill cap.

3. Slide engine cover rearward andlift to remove.

4. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

5. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be within thearea indicated on the dipstick whenthe engine is cold.

10-22 Vehicle Care

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield or rearwindow washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer's instructionsbefore use. If operating the vehiclein an area where the temperaturecan fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Windshield WasherFluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It candamage the vehicle'swindshield washer systemand paint.

Vehicle Care 10-23

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brakewear warning sound is heard,have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

10-24 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑18.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well.This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brake fluid.

Vehicle Care 10-25

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled onthe vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

10-26 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel DriveIt is recommended that the all-wheeldrive lubricants be checked andfilled by the dealer/retailer.

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on thetransfer case, you'll need to addsome lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

A fluid loss could indicate aproblem; check and have itrepaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Carrier Assembly-Differential(Rear Drive Module)

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

Vehicle Care 10-27

How to Check Lubricant

AWD Differential Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, you'll need toadd some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

A fluid loss could indicate aproblem; check and have itrepaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of lubricantto use. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check,be sure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑39.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

10-28 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlSystem Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑39.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park). Theignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Vehicle Care 10-29

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑9.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

10-30 Vehicle Care

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper bladesecurely on the wiper arm untilyou hear the release lever clickinto place.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe windshield.

To replace the rear wiper blade:

1. Lift the rear wiper arm (A) fromthe window.

2. Turn the bottom edge of theblade assembly (B) slightly awayfrom the underside of thewiper arm.

3. Apply downward pressure to theblade assembly and removefrom the wiper arm.

4. Install the new wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe window.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealer/retailer adjust the headlamps.To re-aim the headlamps yourself,use the following procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows:. The vehicle should be placed so

the headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)from a light colored wall.

. The vehicle must have allfour tires on a level surfacewhich is level all the way tothe wall.

Vehicle Care 10-31

. The vehicle should be placed soit is perpendicular to the wall orother flat surface.

. The vehicle should not have anysnow, ice, or mud on it.

. The vehicle should be fullyassembled and all other workstopped while headlamp aimingis being performed.

. The vehicle should be normallyloaded with a full tank of fuel andone person or 75 kg (160 lbs)sitting on the driver's seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

10-32 Vehicle Care

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

The adjustment screw can beturned with a E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tape line.Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Vehicle Care 10-33

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑36.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace one of the headlampbulbs, use the following procedure.To replace the parking/turn signallamp bulb, see Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamps on page 10‑34.

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Remove the two screws from thetop of the front fascia and grille.They are inboard of theheadlamp assembly.

3. Remove the three screwsretaining the headlampassembly.

4. Insert a flat blade tool throughthe opening in the top. Makesure the tool fits through theopening in the headlamp bracketlower arm.

5. Push the locking tab toward therear of the vehicle with the toolto lift the headlamp bracketlower arm.

6. Pull back on the front fascia andthen pull the headlamp assemblyout from the vehicle. Anotherperson might be needed toassist with this step.

10-34 Vehicle Care

7. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the bulbassembly.

8. Turn the bulb assemblycounterclockwise to remove itfrom the housing.

9. Replace the old bulb with anew one.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 toreinstall.

Front Turn Signal andParking LampsTo replace a front turn signal orparking lamp bulb:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 underHeadlamps on page 10‑33 toaccess the front turn signal orparking lamp.

2. Turn the bulb to be replacedcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket assembly.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket assembly.

5. Insert the bulb assembly into theheadlamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb assemblyclockwise until seated.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

Vehicle Care 10-35

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

A. Taillamp/Stoplamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Back-up Lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the two screws holdingin the taillamp assembly.

3. Slide the taillamp assemblyrearward and away from thevehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket beingreplaced counterclockwise todisconnect it.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulbsocket.

6. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket.

7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.

10-36 Vehicle Care

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the fasciaopening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into the bulbsocket and turn it clockwise tolock it into place.

5. Push and turn the license plateback through the fascia opening.

6. Reinstall the two screws holdingthe license plate lamps to thefascia.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 3156

Front Turn Signal/Parking

3157K

Headlamps

High-beam9005or HB3

Low-beam/DRL9006or HB4

Rear Turn Signal,Stoplamp andTaillamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Vehicle Care 10-37

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and other

Power Accessories

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice, maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.

There are two fuse blocks — theengine compartment fuse block, andthe instrument panel fuse block.

To identify and check fuses andrelays, refer to the Fuse UsageChart on the inside surface of thefuse panel door.

10-38 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Fuses Usage

FAN MAIN Cooling Fan Main

REAR/WPR Rear Wiper Motor

FAN AUXCooling FanAuxiliary

Fuses Usage

ECM/TCM/SGCM

Engine ControlModule/TransmissionControl Module/Serial Data GatewayCommunicationModule

Vehicle Care 10-39

Fuses Usage

ECM Engine ControlModule

ENG-3 Engine 3

ENG-2 Engine 2

ENG-1 Engine 1

HYBRIDBEC

Not Used

RUN Run

S/ROOF Sunroof Module

HTD/SEATHeated Seat ControlModule

BCM Body ControlModule

STRTR Starter Motor

WPR Windshield Wiper

4WD/ESCMAll-Wheel DriveSystem

ABSAntilock BrakeSystem Module

Fuses Usage

A/C CLTCH Air ConditioningCompressor

BLWR MTR Blower Motor

AMP Amplifier

HORN Horn

ABSAntilock BrakeSystem Module

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

FRT FOG Front Fog Lamps

I/P BECInstrument PanelBussed ElectricalCenter

DRLDaytime RunningLight

T/LAMP RTRight Marker andParking Lamps

T/LAMP LTLeft Marker andParking Lamps

Fuses Usage

TRLRT/LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

HDLP HI LTPassenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

STOP LP Stoplamps

DEFOG Defroster Fog

HDLPLO RT

Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPLO LT

Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

HDLPHI RT

Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

OSRVMHTR

Outside RearviewMirror Heating

10-40 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

FANMAIN RLY

Cooling Fan MainRelay

FANCTRL RLY

Cooling FanControl Relay

FANAUX RLY

Cooling FanAuxiliary Relay

PWR/TRN RLY

Engine ControlModule/CAM,Canister, Injectors,Electronic ThrottleControl Relay

STRTR RLY Starter Relay

RUN RLY Run Relay

A/CCLTCH RLY

Air ConditioningCompressor Relay

WPRSPD RLY

Windshield WiperSpeed Relay

Relays Usage

HORN RLY Horn Relay

WPRCNTRL RLY

Windshield WiperControl Relay

T/LAMPRLY Parking Lamp Relay

HDLPHI RLY

High-BeamHeadlamp Relay

HDLPLO RLY

Low‐BeamHeadlamp Relay

FRTFOG RLY

Front FoglampRelay

STOPLP RLY

Stoplamp Relay

DEFOGRLY

Defogger Relay

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger side of thelower console.

Pull the latch of the fuse box coverstraight back to access the fuses.

Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuses Usage

PWR SEAT Power Seat

PASSP/WIN

Passenger SidePower Window

Fuses Usage

DRIVP/WIN

Driver Side PowerWindow

S/ROOF Sunroof Module

Fuses Usage

CIGAR Cigarette Lighter

ECM/TCM

Engine ControlModule (ECM)/TransmissionControlModule (TCM)

FSCMFuel Storage ControlModule

ISRVMInside RearviewMirror

CLUSTERInstrument PanelCluster

AIR BAG Airbag System

OSRVMOutside RearviewMirror

KEY CAPKey CaptureSolenoid

WHL S/WSteering WheelSwitch

10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F/DR LCK Front DriverDoor Lock

APO2Accessory PowerOutlet 2

BCM (VB3)Body ControlModule (BCM) (VB3)

DR LCK Door Lock

BCM (VB6)Body ControlModule (VB6)


BCM (VB5) Body ControlModule (VB5)

TRL Trailer

AIRCON Air Conditioner

AUDIO Audio

Fuses Usage

BCM (VB7) Body ControlModule (VB7)

IGN SW Ignition Switch

AIR BAG Air Bag System

WASHER Washer Pump

APO1Accessory PowerOutlet 1

FSCMFuel Storage ControlModule

RR CLR Rear Closure


DRLDaytime RunningLight


ONSTAR OnStar®

Relays Usage

RELAYACC/RAP

Accessory, RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) Relay

RELAYRUN/CRANK

Run/Crank Relay

Vehicle Care 10-43

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22.

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold. See TirePressure on page 10‑50.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, puncturedor broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑52 forinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed driving.

10-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall.The examples below show atypical passenger vehicle tireand a compact spare tiresidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later inthis section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with

the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The letters andnumbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,

Vehicle Care 10-45

traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑62 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If your vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65 .

(C) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The letters andnumbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code is the Tire Identification

Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50 .

10-46 Vehicle Care

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carry capacity a tire is

Vehicle Care 10-47

certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑50 .

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22 .

10-48 Vehicle Care

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22 .

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22 .

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22 .

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑50 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22 .

Vehicle Care 10-49

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑58 .

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑62 .

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22 .

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22 .

10-50 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Too much flexing. Too much heat. Tire overloading. Premature orirregular wear

. Poor handling

. Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage fromroad hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.

The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22 .How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

Vehicle Care 10-51

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget tocheck the compact spare tire,if the vehicle has one. Thecompact spare should be at60 psi (420 kPa). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 .

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated evenwhen they are under‐inflated.

Check the tire's inflationpressure when the tires arecold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no morethan 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregage firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

10-52 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P235/55R18 sizetires, they will require inflationpressure adjustment when drivingyour vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.Set the cold inflation pressureto the maximum inflation pressureshown on the tire sidewall,or 262 kPa (38 psi), whichever islower. See the example following.When you end this high-speeddriving, return the tires to the coldtire inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

Example:

You will find the maximum load andinflation pressure molded on thetire's sidewall, in small letters,near the rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, you would set theinflation pressure for high‐speeddriving at 262 kPa (38 psi).

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle'stires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

Vehicle Care 10-53

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

10-54 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lighton the instrument panel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thismay be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.

See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

Your vehicle's TPMS system canwarn you about a low tire pressurecondition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See TireInspection on page 10‑57, TireRotation on page 10‑57 and Tires onpage 10‑43.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tiresealant is not covered by yourwarranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

Vehicle Care 10-55

TPMS Malfunction Light

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. The TPMS malfunction lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offonce you re‐install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offonce the TPMS sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑59.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

10-56 Vehicle Care

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time youreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors or rotate the vehicle's tires,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matched,to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. When increasingthe tire's pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease the tire's air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressuregage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matcheach tire and wheel position. If ittakes longer than two minutes tomatch any tire and wheel position,the matching process stops andyou will need to start over.

The TPMS matching process isoutlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press and hold the RKEtransmitter's Lock and Unlockbuttons at the same time, forabout three seconds. The hornwill sound twice to indicate thereceiver is ready for the sensormatching process to begin.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side turn signallamp comes on.

5. Remove the valve cap from thetire's valve stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thetire/wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire. The passenger sidefront turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire. The passenger siderear turn signal lamp comes on.Repeat the procedure in Step 5.

Vehicle Care 10-57

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire. The driver side rear turnsignal lamp comes on. Repeatthe procedure in Step 5.The horn sounds two times toindicate the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thedriver side rear tire, and theTPMS sensor matching processis no longer active.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage. See When ItIs Time for New Tires onpage 10‑58 for more information.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every8 000 to 13 000 km (5,000 to8,000 miles). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 .

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑58 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑64 .

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

10-58 Vehicle Care

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22 .

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑54 .

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 .

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑65.

When It Is Time forNew TiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) orless of tread remaining.

Vehicle Care 10-59

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime. This is also true for thespare tire, if the vehicle has one,even if it is not being used.Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including

temperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out before theydegrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle,when it was new, weredesigned to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.

This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance ofyour vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑44for additional information.

10-60 Vehicle Care

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑57and Tire Rotation on page10‑57for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It is allright to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑73 .

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radialand bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicle Care 10-61

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that ishigher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑52 .

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listed on theTire and Loading InformationLabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22 , for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information Label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as,anti‐lock brakes, rollover airbags,traction control, and stability control,the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only useSaturn specific wheel and tiresystems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a Saturn certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑59 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

10-62 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.

The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 25 to 30 cm(10 to 12 inches), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditionson a specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Vehicle Care 10-63

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,

and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.It should be noted that thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

10-64 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose,the wheel, wheel bolts and wheelnuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (exceptsome aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of yourwheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts,replace them only with new Saturnoriginal equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the rightwheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on yourvehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new Saturn originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,

(Continued)

Vehicle Care 10-65

WARNING (Continued)

suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, and do notspin the vehicle's wheels. If youdo find traction devices that willfit, install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

10-66 Vehicle Care

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle will notmove, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed.That would be the tire on theother side, at the opposite end ofthe vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Vehicle Care 10-67

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tireand Tools

To access the spare tire:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Push the levers on the load floor.

3. Lift the load floor and hang thehook to the tailgate opening.

4. Remove the tire protector foam. 5. Remove the wheel retainer boltholding down the spare tire byturning it counterclockwise.

6. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 for more information.

10-68 Vehicle Care

The tools are located between thecompact spare tire and the liftgate.To access the tools:

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing-bolt

C. Jack

1. Remove the wing-bolt (B) fromthe jack.

2. Remove the jack (C) andtool bag (A).

3. Remove the straps holding thebag containing the wheel wrenchand extension jack handle.

Remove the wheel wrench andextension jack handle fromthe bag.

The tools you will be using include:

A. Tool Bag

B. Jack

C. Wheel Wrench

D. Extension Jack Handle

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65 for moreinformation.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Do notremove them yet.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to thejack bolt head and rotate thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe lift head a little.

Vehicle Care 10-69

4. Position the lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire.Make sure all of the jack lifthead is touching the jackingflange under the body. Do notplace the jack under a bodypanel. The lower body panel hasan arrow to aid in locating thejacking location.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

6. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to be removed.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

10-70 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

8. Remove the flat tire.

9. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑65.

10. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel‐mounting surface.

11. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

Vehicle Care 10-71

13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrench

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

15. Tighten the bolts firmly with thewheel wrench.

When reinstalling full plastic coversor center caps, tighten all the plasticcaps hand snug, then tighten withthe wheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

10-72 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire andtools, do the following:

1. Place the wheel wrench intothe bag and use the straps tosecure the bag to the fullycollapsed jack.

2. Install the jack between the backof the trunk and the compactspare tire and secure with thewing bolt.

3. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 under“Removing the Spare Tire andTools” to replace the floor andlock in place.

4. Place the flat, or damaged tire,face down, on the bottom of thespare tire compartment.

Before

After

Vehicle Care 10-73

5. Remove the disk (A) from theretainer bolt. Turn the disk (A)over and place it back on theretainer bolt.

Return the disk back to itsoriginal position after removingthe flat tire from the spare tirecompartment and before storingthe spare tire.

6. Place the wheel retainer boltonto the wheel stow rod andtighten by turning it clockwise.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as possible.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire was fullyinflated when the vehicle was new,but it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22 for the correctinflation pressure.

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)when driving with a spare tire.

The spare tire is for temporaryemergency use only. Replace it witha regular tire as soon as possible.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails.The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which candamage the tire, wheel and otherparts of the vehicle.

Do not use the temporary spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the temporary spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

10-74 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingIf the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the transmissionin P (Park) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks,helping save both batteries andthe radio.

Vehicle Care 10-75

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Open the hood on your vehicleand find the remote positive (+)and remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminals.

Your vehicle is equipped with aremote positive (+) terminal.This is located in the enginecompartment on the driver side

of the vehicle, on the underhoodfuse block. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal, press thetab on the bottom of the fuseblock and lift the cover up.

The remote negative (-) terminalis a stud on the driver side nearthe underhood fuse block.

Place the negative (-) jumpercable clamp on the negative (-)terminal on top of the battery.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

10-76 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldalso be damaged.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts.Do not connect the negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because thiscan cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Vehicle Care 10-77

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm yoursecurity system, if equipped.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse blockcover to its original position,if applicable.

10-78 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground.Consult your dealer/retailer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behindanother vehicle for recreationalpurposes — such as behind amotorhome, see RecreationalVehicle Towing following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing istowing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground. Dolly towingis towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known asa dolly.

Here are some important thingsto consider before recreationalvehicle towing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, makesure the vehicle is preparedto be towed.

Vehicle Care 10-79

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn fog lamps and allaccessories off.

5. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the2 amp IGN SW fuse from theinstrument panel fuse blockand store it in a safe location.See Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑40

10-80 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If the vehicle has afour‐speed automatictransmission, it can be dinghytowed from the front for unlimitedmiles at 105 km/h (65mph).The vehicle could be damaged If105 km/h (65mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Neverexceed 105 km/h (65mph) whiletowing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Reinstall the 2 amp IGN SWfuse to the instrument panelfuse block.

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at theproper level before towing withall four wheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels onthe ground if one of the fronttires is a compact spare tire.Towing with two different tiresizes on the front of the vehiclecan cause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Vehicle Care 10-81

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

10-82 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all brightmetal parts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Vehicle Care 10-83

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstripswill make them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application maybe required. See “Fluids andLubricants” in the Index of the“Maintenance and Warranty andOwner assistance Information”manual.

10-84 Vehicle Care

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thevehicle's chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water.

After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Vehicle Care 10-85

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer/retailer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

10-86 Vehicle Care

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

Vehicle Care 10-87

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzlemay only be used on floor carpetand carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them firstwith plain water or club soda.

Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

10-88 Vehicle Care

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,or spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer/retailer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22.

. are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑8.

. use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑48.

11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work onpage 10‑4.

At your General Motors dealer/retailer, you can be certain that youwill receive the highest level ofservice available. Your dealer/retailer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuine GMreplacement parts, as well as, up todate tools and equipment to ensurefast and accurate diagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performedwhen they have 8 000 to 13 000 km(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See TireRotation on page 10‑57.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilLight Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑8. AnEmission Control Service.

When the change engine oil lightdisplays, service is required for thevehicle as soon as possible, withinthe next 1 000 km/600 miles.If driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicians whowill perform this work and reset thesystem. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil


life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑10.

When the change engine oil lightdisplays, certain services, checks,and inspections are required. Theservices described forMaintenance I should be performedat every engine oil change.The services described forMaintenance II should beperformed when:. Maintenance I was performed

the last time the engine oil waschanged.

. It has been 10 months or moresince the change engine oil lighthas displayed or since the lastservice.

Maintenance I. Change engine oil and filter. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑8. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑15.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

. Tire inflation check. See TirePressure on page 10‑50.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑57.

. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑57.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection (vehicles driven industy conditions only). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

Maintenance II. Perform all services described in

Maintenance I.. Steering and suspension

inspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspection ofhoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑82. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.


. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and sunroof(if equipped) lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑23.

. Automatic transmission fluidlevel check and adding fluid,if needed. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑12.

. Passenger compartment air filterreplacement (or every12 months, whichever occursfirst). More frequent replacementmay be required if vehicle isdriven regularly under dustyconditions.

Additional Required Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑8.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑50.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑57.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑27.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control SystemCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑29.

. Engine cooling system andpressure cap pressure check.Radiator and air conditioningcondenser outside cleaning. SeeCooling System on page 10‑14.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.


First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑12.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Transfer case fluid change(severe service) for vehiclesmainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Transfer case fluid change(normal service).

. Spark plug replacement. AnEmission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill, cooling systemand cap pressure check, andcleaning of outside of radiatorand air conditioning condenser(or every 5 years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑14. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage andreplacement, if needed. AnEmission Control Service.


Service Maintenance IMaintenance

II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •

Engine coolant level check. • •

Windshield washer fluid level check. • •

Tire inflation pressures check. • •

Tire wear inspection. • •

Rotate tires. • •

Fluids visual leak check. • •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •

Brake system inspection. • •

Steering and suspension inspection. •

Engine cooling system inspection. •

Windshield wiper blades inspection. •

Body components lubrication. •

Restraint system components check. •

Automatic transmission fluid level check. •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •

Passenger compartment air filter replacement. •


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, seeEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88863461, inCanada 88863462).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering SystemGM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, inCanada 89021186).

Parking Brake Cable GuidesChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC‐LB.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case and Carrier Assembly -Differential

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Liftgate Door, and Rear FoldingSeat Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Sunroof TrackLubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96815102 —

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.5L V6 Engine 89017342 PF61

3.6L V6 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 19130294 —

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103

3.5L V6 Engine 12591131 41-100

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (24.0 in) 25925618 —

Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (16.0 in) 25925620 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (12.0 in) 96624648 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 8.5 L 9.0 qt

3.5L V6 Engine 10.4 L 11.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.5L V6 Engine 3.8 L 4.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.2 L 5.5 qt

Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Fuel Tank

All Wheel Drive 63.0 L 16.7 gal

Front Wheel Drive 73.0 L 19.2 gal

Transmission Fluid*

Four-Speed Automatic (Bottom Pan Removal) 6.5 L 6.9 qt

Six-Speed Automatic (Drain and Refill) 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑12 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 (LE5) 1 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.5L V6 (LZ4) N Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.6L V6 (LY7) 7 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.044 in)

12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 (LE5) Engine

3.5L V6 (LZ4) Engine 3.6L V6 (LY7) Engine

Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toSaturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your retailer and toSaturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during,and after the purchase of a Saturnvehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the SaturnDifference. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle are resolvedby the retailer's sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, yourownership experience falls belowyour expectations, we suggest youtake the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the RetailCustomer Assistance Liaison. Anymember of the retail managementteam has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns.Normally, concerns can be quicklyresolved at this level.

13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : Should you needadditional assistance, in the U.S.,contact the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center by calling1‐800‐553‐6000. In Canada, call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. A SaturnCustomer Assistance Center teammember will handle your call andassist in providing product andwarranty information, the nearestretailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literatureand discuss any concerns youmay have.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This 17-digit number canbe found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upperdriver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on yourroadside assistance key card.

. The name of your selling andservicing retail facility.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

. Your daytime and evening phonenumbers.

When contacting Saturn, pleaseremember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a retailer'sfacility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): BothSaturn and its retailers arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with yourSaturn vehicle. However, if youcontinue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, Saturn and itsretailers offer the additionalassistance of a neutral partythrough our voluntary participation ina mediation/arbitration programcalled Better Business Bureau(BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. This program isavailable at no cost to you, ourcustomer.

Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program isfree of charge and your case isgenerally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decisiongiven in your case, you can reject itand proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.


Contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephonenumber or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. Saturn Corporation reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, GeneralMotors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitration ofowner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-1999, or you maywrite to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).


Customer AssistanceOfficesSaturn encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. If a customer wishes towrite to Saturn, the letter should beaddressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33173Detroit, MI 48232-5173

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7GMcanada.com

1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installedspecial TDD (TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf) equipment inits Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing or speech-impairedcustomer who has access to a TDDor to a conventional Text Telephone(TTY) can communicate with Saturnby dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTYusers in Canada may dial1-800-263-3830.


Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/saturn

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Online service and maintenance

records. Find Saturn retailers for service

nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar® and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Saturn − www.saturn.com

Saturn Merchandise —www.saturncollection.com

Help Center — www.saturn.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you up to$1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a verylimited period of time from the dateof vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine yourvehicle's eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at1-800-323-9935. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.


Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicle ifyou are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Saturn retailer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.


. Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The sparetire, if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner's responsibility forthe repair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting or

changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give youpermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.


Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer/retailer and request anappointment. By scheduling aservice appointment and advisingyour service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please callyour dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingretailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and hybridspecific warranties in both the U.S.and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, Saturnhelps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, your retailercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Retailers mayprovide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination withminimal interruption of your dailyschedule. This includes one‐way orround trip shuttle service withinreasonable time and distanceparameters of the retailer's area.


Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of theretailer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed bySaturn for shuttle service. Inaddition, for U.S. customers, shouldyou arrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your retailer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement will belimited and must be supported byoriginal receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery retailer. Please contact yourretailer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate retailerpersonnel.

Saturn reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.


Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit premature

durability/corrosion problems, andmay not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

We recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.


Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, phone

number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, phone

number. Vehicle license plate. Vehicle make, model and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑32.


Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair using

aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember ifyour vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as cost stays within reasonablelimits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

A variety of publications areavailable to you. Saturn servicemanuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases,specialized tools and equipment arenecessary to complete certainrepairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either havethe training, or wish to gain agreater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publicationsinformation or to order publicationsin the United States, call toll free1-800-2-SATURN or visitSaturn-publications.com to orderon-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manualsare available by calling toll free1-800-551-4123.


Owner Publications

Information on how to obtainproduct bulletins and as describedbelow is applicable only in the fiftyU.S. states and the District ofColumbia, and only for cars andlight trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) less than10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copiesof individual bulletins are also atyour participating Saturn retailer.You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relating toproduct service bulletins can beobtained by contacting your Saturnretailer.

Service Bulletins

Saturn regularly sends its retailersuseful service bulletins about Saturnproducts. Saturn monitors productperformance in the field. We thenprepare bulletins for servicing ourproducts better. You can get thesebulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects.Some pertain to the proper use andcare of your vehicle. Some describecostly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if doneon time with the latest parts, mayavoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician howto repair a new or unexpectedcondition. Others describe a quickerway to fix your vehicle. They canhelp a technician service yourvehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditionsaffecting a small number ofvehicles. Your Saturn retailer or aqualified technician may have todetermine if a specific bulletinapplies to your vehicle. To orderSaturn bulletins, call SaturnPublications at 1-800-2-SATURN orvisit saturn-publications.com toorder online.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingSaturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or Saturn Corporation.


To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors of CanadaLimited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn CorporationP.O. Box 33173Detroit,, MI 48232-5183

In Canada, call 1-800-263‐1999,or write:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayalso retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets,seat positions, and temperaturesettings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.


GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions for information ondata collection and use. See alsothe OnStar® owner guide in thismanual for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with RSS-210/211 ofIndustry and Science Canada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-40

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-32

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-14Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-38Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Armrest Stoarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-35Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Shiftlock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-15CheckEngine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-50

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56, 3-58Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-48

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

INDEX i-3

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-38

Driver Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-19If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-22Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont.)Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-22Check and Service EngineSoon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Engine (cont.)Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Cooling System Messages . . .5-32Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-23Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-34Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49

INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.)Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-23Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Requirements, California . . . . .9-48System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

GGagesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Gages (cont.)Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-45Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Gate Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Head Restraints (cont.)Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-52Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-19Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-35Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Turn Signal andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Lights (cont.)Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-21

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Gate Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-24Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-23Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-18StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Traction Control System(TCS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-20

INDEX i-7

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-32Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-35Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Mirrors (cont.)Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

i-8 INDEX

OilChange Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-22Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-42Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-33

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-34Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-23Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-29Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-44Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

INDEX i-9

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-41Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14Saturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-24Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14Saturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56, 3-58

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

i-10 INDEX

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-39

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-20Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-20Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

System CheckAutomatic TransmissionShiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-54Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-52Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-53Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-78Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-60Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-40Control System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-60

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-45Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

i-12 INDEX

WWarning Lights, Gages, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid, Low WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

2010 saturn vue owner manual m - general motors · iv introduction using this manual to quickly...

Documents